Canon | PowerShot SX540 HS | User guide | Canon PowerShot SX540 HS User guide

Canon PowerShot SX540 HS User guide
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺳﻡ ”ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(۱٤‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ‬
‫● ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪© CANON INC. 2016‬‬
‫‪CEL-SW4RA2N0‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪*SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪*SDHC‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪*SDXC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ .SD‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺟﺩ ﺃ ًّﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*NB-6LH‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻕ‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﺭﺑﺎﻁ(‬
‫* ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ )= ‪.(۲‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ )ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻌﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Inc.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺅﺳﺳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻭﺯﻋﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻳﺳﻭﺍ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺑﻌﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺭﺍءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ( ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺑﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎﻙ ﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﻫﺅﻻء ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﻭﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻛﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌ ًﺩﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ ٪۹۹٫۹۹‬ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻣﻌﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ )( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳّﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء“ )= ‪.(٤‬‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )‪ (۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫] [ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ )‪ (۱۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫] [ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ )‪ (۱٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫] [ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ )‪ (۱٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫] [ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ )‪ (۱۷‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻗﻭﺳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫● = ‪ :xx‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ “xx” ،‬ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ(‬
‫● ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻣﻼءﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑـ ”ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯﺍﻥ ” ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ“ ﻭ” ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ“ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ – ﺳﻭﺍء ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫)˾(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫)˽( )˼( )˻( )˺(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˽( )˼(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﺑﺣﺙ([‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪/ [(ISO‬‬
‫]‬
‫)‪ / [(Story Highlights‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﻗﻔﻝ([‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ([ ‪/‬‬
‫] )ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ([‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪ /‬ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪) AV OUT‬ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ( ‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ DIGITAL‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) FUNC./SET‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪/‬ﺿﺑﻁ(‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ([‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫)˼˺(‬
‫)˽˺(‬
‫)̀(‬
‫)́(‬
‫)˾(‬
‫)˾˺(‬
‫)˿(‬
‫)˿˺(‬
‫)̀(‬
‫)̀˺(‬
‫)́(‬
‫)˻˺( )˺˺(‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪] :‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ([ ‪/‬‬
‫]‬
‫)ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ([‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪) ] :‬ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ([ ‪/‬‬
‫]‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ([‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫* ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ‪.(۱۱۲ =) NFC‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)˽(‬
‫)˿(‬
‫)˼˺(‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫)˹˺(‬
‫)̂(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪*(N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪/‬ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)˽˺(‬
‫)˻˺( )˺˺( )˹˺( )̂(‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ(‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪TM‬‬
‫)‪[(Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ([‬
‫)‪] / [(Macro‬‬
‫)ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ([‬
‫)‪ (۱٦‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] )ﻓﻼﺵ([ ‪ /‬ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‬
‫)‪ (۱۷‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ([ ‪ /‬ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۲٥ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪۲٥ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ ‪۲ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪۲٦ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۲٦ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۲٦ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪۲ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪۲٦ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ ‪۲ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۲۷ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ‪۳ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۲۷ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ‪۳ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۲۸ .....................................................................FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‪٤ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۲۹ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ‪۱۲ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۳۰ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪۱٤ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪۳۰ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪۱۷ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ ‪۱۷ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪۱۷ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۸ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۸ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ( ‪۱۹ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱۹ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۲۰ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۲۰ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۲۱ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ‪۲۲ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪۲۲ ....................................................................(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲۳ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۲٤ .................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪۳۱ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ ‪۳۲ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۳۲ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪۳۲ ....................................................................(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‪۳٤ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۳٥ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۳٥ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪۳٥ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۳٥ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪۳٦ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪۳۷ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪۳۷ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۳۸ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‪۳۸ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺭﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ( ‪۳۸ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ )ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﻗﻔﻝ(‪۳۹ ..........‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ )ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﻗﻔﻝ(‪٤۰ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ )ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪٤۱ ......................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪٤۲ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ(‪٤۲ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪٤۳ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٤۳ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪٤٤ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪٤٤ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪٤٥ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪٤٥ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪٤٥ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪٤٦ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪٤۷ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪٤۷ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ‪٤۸ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ‪٤۹ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪٤۹ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪٤۹ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪٥۰ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ )ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪٥۰ ............... (4:3‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ ‪٥۰ .................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪٥۱ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‪٥۱ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ‪٥۱ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ‪٥۲ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺁﻟﻲ ‪٥۲ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪٥۳ ......................................................................... IS‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪٥۳ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪٥۳ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٥٤ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪٥٤ .................................................................AF-‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪٥٤ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪٥٥ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪٥٥ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪٥٥ ..............................................‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪٥٦ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ‪٥٦ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ )ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ( ‪٥۷ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ‪٥۷ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪٥۷ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ‪٥۷ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ‪٥۸ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ )ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ( ‪٥۸ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪٥۹ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪٦۰ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ( ‪٦۰ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ( ‪٦۰ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭﺓ )ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ‪٦۱ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ( ‪٦۱ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﺱ‪٦۲ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪٦۲ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪٦۳ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪٦۳ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ ‪٦۳ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻣﺯ ‪٦۳ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪٦٤ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ‪٦٥ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‪٦٥ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪٦٥ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﺁﻟﻲ ﺑﻁﻲء‪٦٦ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪٦٦ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء‪٦٦ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻔﻑ ‪٦٦ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ‪٦۷ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪٦۷ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪٦۷ ........................................................................ iFrame‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۷۸ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪۷۸ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪۷۹ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪۷۹ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺊ‪۷۹ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪۷۹ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۷۹ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۸۰ .................................................................... FE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪٦۸ ........................................................................... P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪٦۸ ..................................................... ([P‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪٦۹ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪٦۹ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻝ ‪٦۹ .............................................. (AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪٦۹ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪۷۰ ..............................................................................ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪۷۰ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ]‪۸۱ ........................................................ ([Tv‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۷۱ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ]‪۸۲ ..................................................... ([Av‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ‪۷۱ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪۷۱ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ( ‪۷۱ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ‪۷۲ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪۸۲ ............................... ([M‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪۷۳ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ )‪۷۳ .............................................................. (Macro‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪۷۳ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ )ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪۷٤ .............................. (MF‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪۷٤ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪۷٥ ........................................................................... AF‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‪۷٥ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪۷٥ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ )ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪۷٥ ..................................... (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪۷٦ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪۷۷ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۷۷ .................................................................... AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪۷۸ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪۸۰ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۸۰ ..........................................................‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪۸۱ ........................................................ M‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪۸۳ ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۸٤ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۸٤ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۸٥ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ( ‪۸٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ‪۸٦ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۸٦ ................................................................... GPS‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ( ‪۸٦ .......‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪۸۷ .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۸۷ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪۸۷ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱۰۰ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪۱۰۱ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ ‪۸۸ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۰۱ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪۱۰۱ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ( ‪۱۰۲ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪۱۰۳ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪۱۰۳ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪۹۱ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱۰٤ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ‪۹۱ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ‪۹۱ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪۱۰٥ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ‪۱۰٦ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۹۲ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ )‪۱۰٦ ................................................... (Story Highlights‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۹۲ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۹۲ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۹۳ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ )ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪۹۳ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪۱۰٦ .................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ‪ BGM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪۱۰۷ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ ‪۱۰۸ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪۸۸ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ‪۸۸ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۸۹ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪۹۰ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۹٤ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۹٤ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‪۹٥ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‪۹٥ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۹٦ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۹٦ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۹٦ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۹۷ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪۹۷ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ ‪۹۷ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‪۹۸ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۹۸ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۹۸ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۹۹ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪۹۹ ....................................................................‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ‪۱۰۰ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ‪۱۰۹ ........................................................................‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪۱۱۱ .................................................................Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ‪۱۱۱ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۱۱۲ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪۱۱۲ .................................... NFC‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱۱۲ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪۱۱٤ .......................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪۱۱٥ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪۱۱۷ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪۱۱۷ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۱۱۸ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۱۱۸ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۱۱۸ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻁ(‪۱۱۹ .............‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ‪۱۱۹ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ‪۱۱۹ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪۱۲۰ ............................................... WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪۱۲۲ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪۱۲۳ .....................................................................‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۳۸ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪۱۳۸ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ‪۱۳۹ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۱۳۹ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ‪۱۳۹ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪۱٤۰ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ ‪۱٤۰ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪۱٤۰ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۱٤۱ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‪۱٤۱ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱٤۱ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ‪۱٤۲ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪۱٤۲ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪۱٤۳ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱٤۳ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪۱٤۳ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۱٤۳ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪۱٤٤ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ‪۱٤٤ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪۱۲۳ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪۱۲٤ ...................................CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ‪۱۲٥ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪۱۲٦ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪۱۲۷ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪۱۲۸ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۲۹ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۲۹ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‪۱۲۹ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪۱۳۰ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۳۰ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۱۳۱ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ ‪۱۳۱ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۱۳۲ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‪۱۳۲ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۳۲ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۱۳۲ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۳۳ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ‪۱۳۳ ......................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۳٤ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪۱۳٤ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ‪۱۳٥ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪۱۳٥ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪۱۳۸ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪۱۳۸ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ‪۱۲۳ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۱۳٤ .....................‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪۱۳٦ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪۱۳٦ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۱۳٦ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ‪۱۳۷ .........................................‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪۱٤٥ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪۱٤٥ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱٤٦ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪۱٤٦ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۱٤۷ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪۱٤۷ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪۱٤۷ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱٤۷ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪۱٥۹ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪۱٥۹ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٦۰ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٦۰ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱٤۸ ..............................................................‬‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ‪۱٦۱ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪۱٤۸ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ‪۱٤۸ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ‪۱٤۹ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً( ‪۱٥۰ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ )ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪۱٥۰ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۱٥۱ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺑﻝ‪۱٥۲ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۱٥۲ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۱٥۲ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۱٥۲ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٥٤ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ ‪۱٥٤ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱٥٥ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱٥٥ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱٥٦ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪۱٥٦ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ ‪۱٥٦ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱٥۷ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱٥۷ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪۱٥۷ ...............................................(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱٥۷ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ‪۱٥۸ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٥۸ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱٥۸ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪۱٥۹ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪۱٥۹ .................................(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‪۱٥۹ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪۱٦۱ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪۱٦٥ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۱٦۷ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‪۱٦۷ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱٦۷ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ(‪۱٦۸ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱٦۸ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪۱٦۹ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱٦۹ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱۷۰ ..............................................................................FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱۷۲ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ“ ‪۱۷٦ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ“ ‪۱۷٦ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“ ‪۱۷۷ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪۱۷۷ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ‪۱۷۷ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪۱۷۸ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۷۸ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪۱۷۹ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱۷۹ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱۸۰ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪۱۸۰ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۸۱ .............................................................. NB-6LH‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۸۱ ...............................................CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪) LH-DC60‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً(‪۱۸۱ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ‪۱۸۲ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‪۱۸٤ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪۱۸٤ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪۱۸٤ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ‪۱۸٥ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ‪۱۸٦ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٦۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ(‬
‫ = ‪۳٤ = ،۳۲‬‬‫● ﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪٥۷ = -‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ‬
‫)= ‪(٦۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ‬
‫)= ‪(٦۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٦۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺟﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫)= ‪(٦۲‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‬
‫‪٥٦ = -‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥۸‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ = ‪۷٥ = ،٥۹ = ،۳۲‬‬‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫● ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ = ‪۷۹ = ،۳۲‬‬‫● ﻛﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬
‫ = ‪٦٤ = ،٤۳‬‬‫● ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻌًﺎ )ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪۳٤ = -‬‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٦۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺱ‬
‫)= ‪(٦۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪۸٤ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ(‬
‫‪۹۲ = -‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ = ‪۱٤۸‬‬‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ = ‪۱٥۲‬‬‫● ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ = ‪۸۸‬‬‫● ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ = ‪۹٦‬‬‫● ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ = ‪۱۰٦‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ = ‪٦٥ = ،۳۲‬‬‫● ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ = ‪۸٤‬‬‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۱٥٤ = -‬‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫● ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ = ‪۱٥۲‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ = ‪۱۱۲‬‬‫● ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫ = ‪۱۲۳‬‬‫● ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪۱۱۸ = -‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻫﻧﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻙ ﺃﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺻﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻻﺑﺗﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻧﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺳﻠﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻔﻪ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﻧﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻧﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺣﺔ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺭ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﻠﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺑﻠﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ( ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭءًﺍ ﺷﺩﻳ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺿﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺑﺻﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻭﺍﺻﻑ ﺭﻋﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ .‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻭﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻬﺏ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺑﺱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﻐﺳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻧﻬﻡ ﺑﻣﺎء ﻏﺯﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺟﻣﻌﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻙ ﻣﺑﺗﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﱠﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ( ﺑﺎﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺳﻠﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻘﻁﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻳﺎ ًء ﺛﻘﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻭﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻣﺗﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﺣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺿﻌﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻁﺎﻣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻁﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺗﻌﺩﻯ ‪ ٤۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ؛‬
‫ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻁﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻛﻙ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻧﻛﺳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺟﺭﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﺿﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺗﻙ ﺑﺟﺭﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺿﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﻠﻛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺻﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭء‬
‫ﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻁﺊ ﺭﻣﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﺿﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺗﺣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻁﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻧﺑﻌﺙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺑﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺗﻛﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٦‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻗﺿﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﻪ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺣﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﺎﻥ ‪+‬‬
‫ﻭ– ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻌﻛﻭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺟﻠﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺏ ﺳﺭﻭﺍﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)˾(‬
‫)˽(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫)˼(‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺳﻠﻙ‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﺑﻳﻙ‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﻧﻘﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻋﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺣﺭﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪CB-2LY‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :CB-2LY‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ )‪ (۱‬ﻭﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫● ‪ :CB-2LYE‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪CB-2LYE‬‬
‫‪۱۸‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ )‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻝ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ )‪ (۱‬ﻭﻷﻋﻠﻰ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫● ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ ۲٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺷﻭﺍﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﻠﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺑﺄﺟﺳﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۹‬‬
‫● ﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﺣﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺞ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻪ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ(‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫)‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﺳﻔﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ(‬
‫ﺭ ﱢﻛﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺯﺡ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ ،(۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺗﺣﻪ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۸۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﻝ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (۲‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ًﺓ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻠﺳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ )‪ (۱‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺻﺩﺭً ﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪۱۹‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ (۱‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺻﺩﺭً ﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺑﻁء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪(۲۰‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲۰‬‬
‫[ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻳﻊ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ )ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﻳﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(۲۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣُﺛﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻁﻘﻁﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻳﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺗﺿﺧﻳﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [ )ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [ )ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ )‪.(۱‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ُ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪۲۳‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۹۷‬‬
‫‪۲٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲٥‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۲٦‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻛﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻏﺿﻭﻥ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۲٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺻﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺧﻣﺱ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ )= ‪.(۱٤۰‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ (۱۱۱ =) Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )= ‪.(۱٥۲‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪) .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ( ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˼(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱٦۷‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫)̀(‬
‫)˽(‬
‫)˾(‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۳٤ = ،۳۲ = ،۲۲‬‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،P‬ﻭ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ )= ‪.(۸۱ = ،٦۸‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫)˿(‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪.(٦٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٥۹‬‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ )= ‪.(٥۸‬‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(٥۷‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻊ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪.(۸٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ (۱۷۰‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪.(۱۷۷‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ )‪ (۲‬ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫● ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱٤٤‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪ ،(۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۹‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻣﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ]‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ )= ‪.(۱۷۷ = – ۱۷۲‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱٤٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪ (٤٥‬ﻭﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۱۱‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻭﻋﻬﺎ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫[]‬
‫● ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ )‪ (۱‬ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫● ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﺃﺣﺭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۳۰‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺧﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪ (٤‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )= ‪(۱٥۲‬‬‫ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪(۱٤۰ = ،۲٦‬‬‫ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬‫ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺃﻱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬‫ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ )= ‪(۸۲ = ،۸۱‬‬‫ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻫﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣُﺛﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻁﻘﻁﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻳﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪.(۳۷ = ،۳٦‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۳۳‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺗﺿﺧﻳﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫] [ )ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [ )ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ(‪) .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫)‪ (۱‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺟﻧﺑًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )‪(.(۲‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [ )ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ( ﺃﻭ ] [ )ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺑﻁء‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ )‪.(۱‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ (۳‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ُ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺟﺯء ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺃﻗﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺭﻕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(۳۲ =) “(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ﻷﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٤‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ‪.(۱۰٦ =) Story Highlights‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(۳۲ =) “(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪“(Smart Auto‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻫﻲ ]‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺣﻣﻳًﺎ )= ‪(۹٤‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )= ‪ (۲۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۳۹‬‬‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ )= ‪.(۱٤۳‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۲۹=) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ < ]ﺑﻼ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ[‬
‫)=‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ )= ‪.(۸۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳٥‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٥٥‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻭﺍ ًﺗﺎ ﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺻﺎﻣﺕ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ )‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۸‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺩﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺿًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ )ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ( )= ‪.(۳٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻹﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(٥۳‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﻅﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ )= ‪.(۳۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﻣﻕ*‬
‫ﻧﺎﺱ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻅﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫–‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺭﺿﻊ ﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﻭﻥ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‬
‫ﺭﺿﻊ ﻧﺎﺋﻣﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫*‬
‫–‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﻏﺭﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻛﺷﺎﻓﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺳﻣﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻛﻥ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺳﻣﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳٦‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺋﻣﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺋﻣﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪drive mode‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ] [ )= ‪ (٤٤ = ،۳۷‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‬
‫ﻭﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(٥۰‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺎﺋﻣﻳﻥ( ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫]ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ )ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻳﻥ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ )ﻣﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺛﻧﻰ ﻋﺷﺭ ﻋﺎﻣًﺎ( ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ )= ‪ .(٤٦‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﻳﻥ )= ‪.(۲۰‬‬
‫● ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﺟﺭّ ﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪.(٦۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻹﺧﻁﺎﺭﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.[ ] [ ] [ ] :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ‬
‫)ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ‬
‫)ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻛﺄﻓﺿﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺟﻣﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻧﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺿﻲء ‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻔﻭﺕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻓﺭﺻﺔ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ )ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ(*‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫‪) Macro‬ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ .(Hybrid IS‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ] [ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺭ )ﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫)ﻓﻌّﺎﻟﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ )ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ‪.(IS‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻔﺎﻋﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻣﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻔﺎﻋﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪ .(٥۳‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪.IS‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ( ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻫﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ )ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺭ ًﺑﺎ )ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 200x‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﻛﺑﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪ (٦۸‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫)ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻪ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺷﻳﺭ )‪ (۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ :‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ‪ :‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ‬‫)‪.(ZoomPlus‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ :‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫● ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )= ‪ ،(٥۰‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺩ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫‪۳۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫] [ < ]ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ )ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ –‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺩﺕ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۹‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪،۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫[<]‬
‫)= ‪ < (۲۹‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺩﺍ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )=‪.(٤۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ )ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﻗﻔﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﻔﻌﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻫﺩ ًﻓﺎ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻪ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ] [‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪.۲ – ۱‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺑﺩء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪.IS‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ < (۲۹‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻳﺎ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ )ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ )= ‪ (۷٥‬ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻛﺱ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪.Auto‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ )ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ )ﺍﺛﻧﺎﻥ ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ(؛ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻋﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻩ‪/‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۱‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﻔﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫)= ‪.(٤۳‬‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺣﺭﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻷﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ] ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ )ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ( ﻓﻲ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻔﻲ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻌﺎﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻔﻲ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻔﻲ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺭّ ﻙ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭﺭ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ <‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ[ < ]‬
‫]‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ(“‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻪ[‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺩﺕ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻙ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﺳﻬﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪.(٤۱ =) Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺗﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩﺋﺫٍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫[ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ )ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(“‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ“ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[<‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ[ < ]ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۳‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺿﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺗﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻻ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ )ﻣﻥ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ )ﻣﻥ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٤۳‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۸‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫]ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ]ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ[ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻟﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ[ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪) .‬ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺿﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٤۳‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺑﺎﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ )= ‪ (٥۰‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ[ )= ‪ (٥۰‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻛﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ )= ‪ ،(۹٦‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ )= ‪ (۹۰‬ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۹۰‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۹٤‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪(۸۸‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ ،(۹۳‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪(۹۱‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ )= ‪ (۹۲‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪ (۱۰۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ )= ‪ (۱۰۱‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٥٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۱٥۸‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ )= ‪ (۹۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ )= ‪ً (۹۰‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻫﺅﻻء ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻟﻬﺅﻻء ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻠﻬﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻓﺎﺋﺩﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻹﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺻﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ‪.(۱۰٦ =) Story Highlights‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺎ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ( ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ )ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺳﻣﺎﺋﻬﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺅﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(٤۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ( ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۲‬ﺷﺧﺻًﺎ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻳﻼﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ )= ‪.(۳۰‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻳﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪،‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻔﻅ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺎﺋﻼً‬
‫ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯﻳﻥ ”ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ“ ﻭ”ﺃﻁﻔﺎﻝ“ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۳٦‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻣﻝء ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﻣﺱ )= ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺳﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻛﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻭﺗﺎﺑﻌﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻣﻭﻫﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻭﻫﻬﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ )= ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ(‬
‫)= ‪.(۸٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ )= ‪ (۷۸ = ،٤٤‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻛﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻛﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻋﻁﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺅﻻء ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻛﺎﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺅﻻء ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻫﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫ﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺳﻣﺎﺋﻬﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء )ﺣﺗﻰ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻫﺅﻻء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻛﺄﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﻭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺗﺷﺎﺭﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻊ‪.[.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٤٦‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻊ‪ ،[.‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻًﺎ ﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۸‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻳﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ[‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ“ )= ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫● ﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‬
‫)ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫] [] [] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ )ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻣﻥ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺟﻭﻫﻬﻡ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﻧﻣﻭﻫﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻧﺗﻅﺎﻡ؛‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻝء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﺧﻣﺱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٤٦‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٤٦‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺎﺋﻼً ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻣﻝء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﺧﻣﺱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺃﻱٍ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺑﺔ )= ‪ ،(٤۷‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )= ‪ (٤٦‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ( ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻣﻪ )= ‪ (۸۷‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ )= ‪ (۹۱‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻪ )= ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ‪ُ .‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫‪ ۱۸۰ x ۱۳۰‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ُ .‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ُ .‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۱۳۰ x ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺄﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫● ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫‪٤۹‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٤٦‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪٥۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۸۰‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭﺍ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ ﺑﺻﺑﻐﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺑﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ )ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪(4:3‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ٤۲۰) A2‬ﻣﻡ × ‪ ٥۹٤‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۲۱۰ × ۱٤۸ − ٤۲۰ × ۲۹۷) A3 – A5‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺯﺋﺑﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۱۳۰ × ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ‪ ۱۸۰ × ۱۳۰ ،‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‬
‫● ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ )= ‪ ،(٤٤‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺎﺡ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۸۰‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺧﻁﻭﻁ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫‪ ٦۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪1280 x 720‬‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )‪(HD‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۲‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺁﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺳﻳﻛﺑﱢﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪[AF‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺁﻟﻲ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ )= ‪.(٥۳‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﻛﻬﺩﻑ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﻛﺑﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺟﺩًﺍ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪(۳۸‬‬‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪(۷٥ =) AF‬‬‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻛﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ )= ‪(۱٤۸‬‬‫● ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[IS‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫”ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺁﻟﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺁﻟﻲ“‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺁﻟﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٥۲‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،[IS‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(٥۳‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[ )= ‪.(٥۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،[IS‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ(‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۷‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪ ،(٥۳‬ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺿﻲء ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪AF-‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺿﻲء ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺗﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺳﺭﻳﻊ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﺣﻔﻅ[ )= ‪.(٥٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱٦۸‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ )= ‪ (٥٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺳﺭﻳﻊ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻭﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۹٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۰۰‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻋًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻋﺗﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺧﻔﻭ ًﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﻓﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺷﺎﺣﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ )= ‪.(۹۰‬‬
‫● ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﻟﻠﺳﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ )ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻁﺑﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻳﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺳﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺩﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻗﺩﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻣﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﻣﺛﻼً‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺩﻣﺞ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺗﻪ ‪ ۲٥ – ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٥۷‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۸‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬
‫ﻳُﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪٦ – ۳‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ )ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﻳﺛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻫﻲ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻊ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪.(٥۷‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۰٦‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ )= ‪.(۸٦‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﻣﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﺣﺑﺏ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ (۷۰ =) ISO‬ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺑﺎﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ‪ ،(٤۱ =) Auto‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﻣﻧﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(٥۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ )ﻁﻭﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﻫﻭ ] [ )‪ ،(2592 x 1944‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫)ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺟﻣﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥۹‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﱢ ﻑ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٥۹‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ )ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ(‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻗﺩﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٥۹‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺷﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺷﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۰‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋُﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۱۲‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٥۹‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻓ ًﺋﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﺭﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺃﻏﻣﻕ ﻭﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ( ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭﺓ )ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۲‬ﻭﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﻲ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ .(٤۹‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ،۳‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٥۹‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٥۹‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٥۹‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺳﻣًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٥۹‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺿﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻣﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻏﻣﺯ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺑﺳﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻣﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺑﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻓﻣﻬﻡ ﺑﻭﺳﻊ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻹﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻧﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻣﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻣﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﺯﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﺑﺗﺄﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻏﻣﺯ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺑﻁء‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻐﻁﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﻌﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻅﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﻥ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﻬﻣﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻛﻐﻣﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﻳﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻣﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻭﺭ( ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ .(۷٥‬ﻳﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻔﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٥۹‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺿﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺿﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪) .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺿﻳ ًﺋﺎ‪ (.‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺿﻣﺎﻣﻙ ﻟﻶﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻥ ‪ -2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+2‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪.(۱٦۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٦٥‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﺁﻟﻲ ﺑﻁﻲء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻻ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺳﻠﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﺁﻟﻲ ﺑﻁﻲء“‪ ،‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﺁﻟﻲ ﺑﻁﻲء[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء“‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻔﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻭﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﻌﻳ ًﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺎﺩﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺧﻔﻑ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪iFrame‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺿﻊ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻩ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ‪.(۱۰٦ =) Story Highlights‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ( ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫● ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪٦ – ٤‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫]‬
‫)= ‪.(٦۷‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٦٥‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻳُﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪2x‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1x‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1/2x‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﻲ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٥۱‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.iFrame‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٦٥‬‬
‫● ‪ iFrame‬ﻫﻭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬
‫● ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﻲ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٥۱‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻝ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‬
‫● ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ] [‪ :‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪AE‬؛ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ )= ‪.(۱٦۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻝ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ )= ‪– ٦۹‬‬
‫= ‪ ،(۸۰‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ (۷۰ =) ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪) (۷۸‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺗﺏ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ (۲۸ =) FUNC.‬ﻭ‪ (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ )ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+2‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(AE‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺟّ ﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻳﻳﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ( ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،AE‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ ﻛﺄﻛﺛﺭ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺿﻣﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ )ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ ،(AE‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪،[AUTO‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻝ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺣﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺧﻁﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺩﻗﻳ ًﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺗﺣﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )‪ ،(WB‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺣﻳﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(“ )= ‪ (۷۱‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ؛ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﺱ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻐﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪Tungsten‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻫﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fluorescent‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﺳﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fluorescent H‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۷۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻟﻁﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻛﺛﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۲‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻏﺎﻣﻕ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻣﻳﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺿﺭ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻣﺭ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﺷﺭﺍ ًﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﺷﺭﺍ ًﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﺷﺭﺍ ًﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻳﺩ )= ‪.(۷۲‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪ (۷۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻥ ‪.٥ – ۱‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(“ )= ‪ (۷۱‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﻗﻭﻯ‪/‬ﺃﻛﺑﺭ )ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻏﻣﻕ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺿﻌﻑ‪/‬ﺃﻓﺗﺢ )ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻓﺗﺢ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ )‪(Macro‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،AF‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۹‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪.MF‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫● ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(٤۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪ MF‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )‪،(۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻭﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ )ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪ (۷٥ =) AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ[ ﻭﻗﻔﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﻋﺎﺩﻱ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪ (۳۸‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫)= ‪ (۷٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻛﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ )= ‪ ،(۱٤۸‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ 1.6x‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2.0x‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ <‬
‫]ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ‪] < [MF-‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ < (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻥ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ )ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪(MF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺃﺳﻬﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭ)ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ( ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪ [MF‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪ MF‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪ (۳۸‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫‪.(٥۲ =) AF‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺋﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺭﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ(“ )= ‪.(۳۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﻣﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ( ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )] [ ﻓﻘﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﻳﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺛﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﺻﻔﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫●‬
‫‪۷٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ‪ [AF‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺻﻐﻳﺭ[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻋﺎﺩﻱ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪ (۳۸‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪ (۷٤‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )= ‪.(۷۳‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ )ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪[AF‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٥۲‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ )ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۷٦‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺧﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﻲء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺄﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ )ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪.[AF‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪(۷٥=) “AF‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪.[AF‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻫﺩ ًﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ]‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪) .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷٦‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺫﻱ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )‪(Servo AF‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۷٦‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ ،(۷۳‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )= ‪ .(٤٥‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻛﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‪ (۷٦ =) [Servo AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻣﻁﺎﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﺟﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Servo AF‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۷‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪.AF‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٤۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ AF‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫[ ﻭﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪.MF‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺟﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۷۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۸‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۸‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫)= ‪.(۹۰‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪ (٥۹‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )= ‪ (۷۳‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪،(۷۷ =) AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٤۳‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺑﺎﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ‪.(٤۱ =) Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺊ‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﺑﻁﺊ ﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﻣﻧﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(٥۳‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪ ،(٦۹‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ‪ -2‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ +2‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ < ]ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪] < [FE‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۲۹‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ < ]ﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،(٦۹ =) AE‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۷۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺟّ ﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫[؛ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،FE‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ FE‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ FE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﺩﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﻫﻲ ] [ )ﻓﺎﺋﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ( ﻭ] [ )ﺩﻗﻳﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۸۰‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([Tv‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۸‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺫﻛﺎ ًء ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺗﻌﻘﻳ ًﺩﺍ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭً ﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪[IS‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٥۳‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪ 1.3‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ [ ] ISO‬ﻭﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ )= ‪.(۸۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ]‬
‫‪۸۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([M‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([Av‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۸‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۸‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺯﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫● ]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪ (۲۹‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﻟﻭ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫)‪ (۱‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )‪ ،(۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )‪ (٤‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ )‪.(۳‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ )ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫)˼(‬
‫)˽(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۳‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪) ۲‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ )ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.(.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪ 1.3‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ [ ] ISO‬ﻭﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ] [‪ :‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٦۹‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﻗﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ‪] ،‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪] ،‬‬
‫]‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ < ]ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ < ]ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ[‬
‫< ]ﻳﺩﻭﻱ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻭﺗﺻﻔﺣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸٤‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫< ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪(۲۹ =) MENU‬‬
‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ < ]ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ[ < ]ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪(۲۹ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ < ]ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪.(۱٦۸‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫)‪ (۱‬ﻣﺧﻔﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPS‬‬
‫‪۸٥‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۸٥‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۸٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (۸٥‬ﻫﻭ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ‪) Coordinated Universal Time :UTC‬ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﱠﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺟﺭﻳﻧﺗﺵ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ )‪) (UTC‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ )= ‪.(٥۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪،Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪ .(۱۳٤‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪.GPS‬‬
‫● ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻔﺗﻘﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [---‬ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻙ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻳﻠﻣًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۳٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪/‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )= ‪.(۸٥‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ )= ‪ ،(۸٥‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﻳﻥ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪.(٤٥‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ < ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ < ]ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۸۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ < ]ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۹٤‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ )= ‪ (۹٦‬ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ )= ‪.(٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪.(۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۳٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺛﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻹﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪” (۲‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ“ )= ‪” (۸۸‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪” (۹۲‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ“ )= ‪ .(۹۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ (۹٤‬ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۹۷‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (۱٥۷ =) “(DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱٥۹‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )= ‪ ،(۱۰٥ = – ۱۰۱‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪.(۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻰ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸۹‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺛﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ )ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ( ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫[ < ]ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ )= ‪ (۷۸ = ،٥۸ = ،٤٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫)= ‪ (٥۷‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑـ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،(۳‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭ”ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ“ )= ‪ (۸۸‬ﻭ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ (۹۲‬ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪،(۹٤‬‬
‫]ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ“ )= ‪ (۹۷‬ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (۱٥۷ =) “(DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱٥۹‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻛﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ < (۲۹‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ < ]ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪ .(۲۹‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ )ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪ (٥۷‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻅﺕ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺃﺳﻣﺎﺋﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء“ )= ‪ ،(۹۱‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ“ )= ‪ ،(۸۷‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] []‬
‫ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٤۸‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10x‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ )‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ]‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫] [] [] [] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫]ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺑﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪ (۲٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )= ‪ ،(۸۸‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ[‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺍﺑﺩﺃ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱﱟ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻣﺗﻌﺔ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ )ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‬‫ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )= ‪(۸۸‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ )= ‪(۹۰‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌَ ﺭَ ﺿﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۹٦‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪ .(۲۸‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﻣﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪،۱٤۱‬‬
‫= ‪.(۱٤۲‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(۹٤‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(۹٤‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺁﺧﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﺂﺧﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹٥‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻓﺗﺢ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(۹٤‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻣﻥ ”ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫‪۹٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۹٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۹٤‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“ )= ‪،(۹۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ“ )= ‪ ،(۹٥‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“ )= ‪،(۹۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ“ )= ‪ (۹٥‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۹۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“ )= ‪ ،(۹۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۹۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹۹‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۹۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ (۹۸‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ ،(۹۳‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺭﺃﺳﻳًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪” ،(۸٤‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ“ )= ‪” ،(۹۲‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪” ،(۹٤‬ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪” ،(۹٦‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪” ،(۱٥۷ =) “(DPOF‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪(۱٥۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ“ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪ (۱۰۳ = – ۱۰۱‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ )= ‪ (٥۰‬ﻣﻥ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪ ،(٤٥‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻅﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺫﺑﺔ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)˼( )˻(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪.(۱‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ )‪ (۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻻﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ )‪.(۳‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻟﺔ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(“ )= ‪.(۷۱‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۰۱‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ] [ )= ‪ (٥۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۱۰۱‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۰۱‬‬
‫‪۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻘﻝ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )= ‪.(۷۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ( ﻭﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﺋﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺄﺛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺧﺎﻁﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻣﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﺣﺑﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۹۲‬‬
‫‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] []‬
‫ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪،(۸٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻗﺻﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● )‪ (۱‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭ)‪ (۲‬ﻫﻭ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﺻﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ] [‪ .‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺹ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﻣﻥ ] [( ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺹ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻧﻘﻝ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ]‬
‫ﻓﻲ ] [ ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ] [؛ ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ“‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫] [ ﺛﻡ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] []‬
‫ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ]‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﻗﺻﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺫﺕ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ )‪(Story Highlights‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪،(۳٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ( ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ (۸٦ =) ۲ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ(“‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ (۸٦ =) ۲ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(“‪ ،‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ‪.‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺷﺧﺹ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺭﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻛﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺗﻪ ‪ ۳ – ۲‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺳﻌﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ“ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ )= ‪ (۱۰۷‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ‪.BGM‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺷﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻧﻣﻭ ﻁﻔﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﺷﻬﺭ ﻛﺄﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺷﺧﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻟﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺷﻐﻭﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻭ”ﻧﺎﺱ“ ﻭ]ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ[ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪) (۳٤‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ(‬‫ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )= ‪(٦۷‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ )= ‪) (٥۷‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻔﻳﻠﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ[‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٤‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ‪،Story Highlights‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ‪ BGM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺳﺑﻌﺔ ﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ‪ BGM‬ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ )= ‪.(۸٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ‪ BGM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ٤ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ )‪Story‬‬
‫‪ ،(۱۰٦ =) “(Highlights‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺳﺑﻌﺔ ﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ‪ BGM‬ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ‪ BGM‬ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۳ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ )‪Story‬‬
‫‪ (۱۰٦ =) “(Highlights‬ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ”ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۳ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ )‪Story‬‬
‫‪ ،(۱۰٦ =) “(Highlights‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ‪.BGM‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺷﺧﺹ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ )‪“(Story Highlights‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۰٦‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ‪ BGM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻻﺣﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ‬
‫‪ BGM‬ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ‪.(۱۰٦ =) BGM‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ،BGM‬ﻓﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻻ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ [BGM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪ ،BGM‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ BGM‬ﻓﻘﻁ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﺧﺎﻟﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫● ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ‪ BGM‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ]ﻣﺳﺎﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ‪ [BGM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ[ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺷﺧﺹ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ‪.BGM‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ BGM‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ‪ BGM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ“ )= ‪ ،(۱۰۷‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۹‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ )‪.(۱۰٦ =) “(Story Highlights‬‬
‫ﺟﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻛﺛﻳﺭﺓ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ‪.(۱۰٦ =) Story Highlights‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺧﻠﻁ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ [‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ )‪“(Story Highlights‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۰٦‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ ٤۰‬ﻣﻠ ًﻔﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺛﺭ )ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‪ .‬ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺎﺩًﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ؟[‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ ۱٥‬ﻳﻭﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺛﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻧﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ[ ﻟﺑﺿﻊ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۱۱۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻔﻅ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۲‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻣًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪.(۱۰۷ =) BGM‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۱‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ”ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۸٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻭﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻻً ”ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺟً ﺎ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺩﻋﻡ ‪ (DPS over IP‬ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۲‬‬
‫● ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪(۱۱۲ =) NFC‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Android‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ‪) NFC‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 4.0‬ﻣﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺙ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ )= ‪(۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ )ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣُﺿﻣﱠﻧﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﺗﻼﻙ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ Canon‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻥ ”‪“CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Camera Connect‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪NFC‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Android‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪) NFC‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪OS‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 4.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻭﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ‪.NFC‬‬
‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ )= ‪ .(۱۳٤‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺑﺩء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ NFC‬ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ N‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ) ( ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫‪ Google Play‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ ،Camera Connect‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۳‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ( ) N‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫)] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪،‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﺩء ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋﺫٍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱٤‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ‪ ،NFC‬ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺻﻁﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺿﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺟﺭﺏ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺄﺳﻳﺱ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻣًﺎ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺟﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۳‬ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻻ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۳٥‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪۲‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ .( ) N‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ‪ ،NFC‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ <‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ[ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [NFC] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ( ) N‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۱۲‬ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ N‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪،‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻁﺎﻟﺑﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪“NFC‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۱۲‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺟﻝ ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۱۷‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone‬ﻭ‪ ،iPad‬ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫‪ Camera Connect‬ﻓﻲ ‪ App Store‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Android‬ﺍﺑﺣﺙ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻓﻲ ‪Google Play‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۲‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪SSID‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫● ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻗﺭﺍﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋﺫٍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۸‬ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻻ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۸‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱٦‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫)] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪،‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻫﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪< (۲۹ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ[ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[‬
‫< ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ‬
‫]ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪) SSID‬ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،(٤‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪(۲۹ =) MENU‬‬
‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ[ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ[ <‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۷‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۸‬ﻭ‪ ۹‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ“ )= ‪(۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺑﺎﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ٤ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ“ )= ‪.(۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻗﺭﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ“ )= ‪.(۱۱٥‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ُﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ۸ – ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ (۱۲۰ =) “WPS‬ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ٤ – ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ“ )= ‪(۱۲۲‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ“ )= ‪ (۱۱۷‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭ‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Restart‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭﻳﻥ ‪ Windows 7 Starter‬ﻭ‪.Home Basic‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻧﻅﺎﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪) Windows 7 N‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ( ﻭ‪) KN‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻭﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﻭﺑﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ‪ Windows Media Feature Pack‬ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730‬‬
‫● ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ ISP‬ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.8‬ﻫﻧﺎ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://www.canon.com/icpd/‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻌﻳﺵ ﻓﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪.zip‬‬
‫‪۱۱۸‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Easy Installation‬ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﻬﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ )ﺣﺫﻑ( ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺩﺃ[ ◄ ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ[ ◄ ]‪Canon‬‬‫‪ ،[Utilities‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Mac OS‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ]ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ[ ◄ ]‪،[Canon Utilities‬‬‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻓﺭﻍ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺩﺃ[ ◄ ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ[ ◄‬
‫]‪◄ [CameraWindow] ◄ [Canon Utilities‬‬
‫]‪/Wi-Fi connection setup‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺗﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Windows‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺙ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‬‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ )ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ( ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ )ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ( ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻭﺗﻭﻛﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ )‪(ICMP‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ )‪(UPnP‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﻧﻌﻙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ‪Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۲۰ =) (WPS‬ﺃﻭ ﻻ )= ‪ .(۱۲۲‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ )‪(SSID/ESSID‬‬
‫ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ESSID‬ﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ُﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑـ ”ﺍﺳﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ“ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪WPA2-PSK :‬‬
‫)‪ (AES‬ﺃﻭ )‪ WPA2-PSK (TKIP‬ﺃﻭ )‪ WPA-PSK (AES‬ﺃﻭ )‪ WPA-PSK (TKIP‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) WEP‬ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ )ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ‪ /‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻁﻠﻕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ”ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ“ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ )ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ WEP‬ﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ”‪ “۱‬ﻛﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ‪ WPS‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ )‪ (LAN‬ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺭﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻣﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ”ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ[‬
‫< ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪.[MAC‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪WPS‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ‪ WPS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺇﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ PIN‬ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ‪.WPS‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.[WPS‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪،[WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪.[PBC‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۰‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،[PBC‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ WPS‬ﻟﺑﺿﻊ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫”ﺍﺑﺩﺃ“ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۱‬‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫● ‪ :Windows‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Downloads Images From Canon‬‬
‫‪/Camera‬ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪.[Canon‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺟً ﺎ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﺎﻡ( ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۲‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪< (۲۹ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ[ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[‬
‫< ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.(۱۳٦ =) ۲‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Mac OS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‪[CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ‪.Dock‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪ [PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٦‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.(۱۲۰ =) “WPS‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ )ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۳۰‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۸‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪“WPS‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۲۰‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]*[‬
‫ﻟﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۳‬ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪.(۱۲۰ =) “WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۸‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.(۱۲۰ =) “WPS‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۳‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ (۱۲۰ =) “WPS‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ“ )= ‪ (۱۲۲‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﺗﺻﻔﺢ ﻭﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻹﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻔﺢ )‪ ،Microsoft Internet Explorer‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ ،GATEWAY‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ )‪.(http://www.canon.com/cig/‬‬
‫● ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺑًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ُﺗﻔﺭَ ﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﻓﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ )‪ (ISP‬ﻭﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻥ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺃﺿﻑ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۷‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪“WPS‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۲۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۲۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑـ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺃﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ ،GATEWAY‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺧﻁﺭﻙ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫‪۱۲٤‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ ﺑـ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۸‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻠﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪.GATEWAY‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ ﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ http://www.canon.com/cig/‬ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [ )= ‪ (۱۳۲‬ﻭ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ“ )= ‪ (۱۲٥‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻓﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻠﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪۱‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۲٤‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﺭﺕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻠﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻠﻡ[‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫)] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪،‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،YouTube‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺃﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲٦‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻣﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Canon Online Photo Album‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone‬ﻭ‪ ،iPad‬ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪Canon Online Photo Album‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ‪ App Store‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ ،Android‬ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Canon Online Photo Album‬ﻓﻲ ‪Google Play‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛ ًﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۲۷‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪) SSID‬ﺍﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱٥٤‬‬
‫● ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۸‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪< (۲۹ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ[ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[‬
‫< ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ‬
‫]ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪) SSID‬ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،(۳‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪(۲۹ =) MENU‬‬
‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ[ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ[ <‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﱠ ﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‪.‬ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪FlashAir/‬‬
‫‪.Eye-Fi‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺑﺩء‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺗﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫)] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫[]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ( ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺗﻣﻛﻳﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪،‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ[ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪،(۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ“ )= ‪ (۹٥‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻊ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫] [ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪.(۱۰۰‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ ،(۱۲۹‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫‪۱۳۰‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻳﺩ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺿﻐﻁﻬﺎ )= ‪ ،(۱۰٥‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻭﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ً‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﺿﻌﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﺳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻟﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺗﻣﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻻ[ ﻛﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ < (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ[ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[<‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻑ ﺗﻌﻠﻳ ًﻘﺎ )= ‪.(۳۰‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻳﺎ )ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪.Image Transfer Utility‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ Image Transfer Utility‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ )= ‪.(۱۱۸‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ‪ Image Transfer Utility‬ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪.(۱۲٤ =) GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ] [ ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﻩ ”‪Image‬‬
‫‪) “Transfer Utility‬ﻣﺟﺎ ًﻧﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [ ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺿﻑ ] [ ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪.(۱۲٤ =) “CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺟﱢ ﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(۱۲٤ =) CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﺿﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ )ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Windows‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺑﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻭﻕ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Add new camera‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Add new camera‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ .iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻧﻭﻱ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ .CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ“ )= ‪ ،(۱۲٦‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ .GATEWAY‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ ،iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ )‪ Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ“ )= ‪.(۱۳۲‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone‬ﻭ‪ ،iPad‬ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Canon Online Photo Album‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ App Store‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪،Android‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Canon Online Photo Album‬ﻓﻲ ‪ Google Play‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺟﱢ ﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .(۱۲٤ =) CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﺿﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻏﻳّﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪.iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪.GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ‪ ،Canon Online Photo Album‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪.Canon Online Photo Album‬‬
‫‪۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫● ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪(۱۳٤‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ )= ‪(۱۳٤‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﺏ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ ﻹﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪،۱۱٥‬‬
‫= ‪.(۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ُﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻅﻬﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪.(۱۱٥‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Camera‬‬
‫‪ Connect‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺗﻌﻭﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﻣﻧﻁﻘﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪ .(۲۰‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۳۹‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻶﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ MENU‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ .AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ )= ‪(۱۳٦‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[ )= ‪(۱۱٥‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫]ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[ )= ‪(۱۳٦‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ[‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫‪ : O‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ – ‪ :‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ )ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ( ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۳٥‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﻘﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ )= ‪.(۳۰‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۳٥‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻳّﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ )= ‪.(۳۰‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺑﺭﻣﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻣًﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺧﺗﻠ ًﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻋِ ﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻘﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ[‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ (Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ )= ‪.(۱٤٤‬‬
‫‪۱۳۷‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۲۹ =) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ‬
‫ﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻛﺗﻡ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪ (۸٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺗﻡ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ‪ (۲۸ =) FUNC.‬ﺃﻭ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ .(۲۹‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﻠﺻﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(۲۰‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱٦۷‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪ (۲۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﻥ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ] ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩ[ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻟﺩﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫)= ‪ .(۲٥‬ﻭﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ )= ‪.(۲٦‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻭ]‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱٦۷‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺷﺭ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۰‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪ (۱٤۰‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺟﺎﻫﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ (.‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻠﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻁﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳُﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﻠﻥ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ .‬ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﻬﻡ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ )‪ (0001 – 9999‬ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٫۰۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪ ،(۱٤۱‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٤۱‬ﻟﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪ ،(۱٤۱‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ )ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ۹۹۹۹‬ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ(‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۰۰۰۱‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ ،0001‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻛﻝ ﺷﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻝ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺑﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻳﻭﻣﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪ ،(۱۳٤‬ﻭﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )= ‪ ،(۳۲‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪ ،(۷۳ =) MF‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ‪/‬ﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺩﻡ‪/‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[ft/in‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ )= ‪(۱٤۸‬‬
‫● ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ[ )= ‪(۱۱۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺭﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪(٤٥‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )= ‪ (۱۳۹‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[ )= ‪(۱۳۹‬‬‫ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۱٤۳‬ﻭ]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ )= ‪(۱٤۸‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ )= ‪(۷۱‬‬‫ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ]‬‫[ )= ‪.(٥۹‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(۱۱۱ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﺭﺑﺎﻁ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪*NB-6LH‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪) USB‬ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪*(Mini-B :‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ‪HTC-100‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫‪High-Power Flash‬‬
‫‪HF-DC2‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫‪Connect Station‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪*CS100‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫‪LH-DC60‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪) Canon‬ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ‪ ٦۷‬ﻣﻡ(*‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫‪۱٤٥‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﺍء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ )ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪.(IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ‪.FA-DC67A‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻳﺣﻕ ﻟﻙ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺻﺎﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-6LH‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫● ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-6LH‬‬
‫● ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻣﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ NB-6L‬ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﺳﻔﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪LH-DC60‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻭﻫﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪High-Power Flash HF-DC2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻫﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ‪FA-DC67A‬‬
‫● ﻫﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ‪ ٦۷‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻳﺩﻭﻱ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻁﺎء ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪ (AV‬ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ‪HTC-100‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﺩﺧﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۷‬‬
‫‪Connect Station CS100‬‬
‫● ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻭﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺧﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ )= ‪.(۱٦۸‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ‪) HTC-100‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً( ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ]‬
‫[ ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ ٍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫)ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً( ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻭﺍﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻭﺍﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ“ )= ‪ (۱٤۸‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺧﺭﺝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )‪ NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ‪(PAL‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ”ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ (٥۲ =) “AF‬ﻭ”‪ -MF‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۷۳‬ﻭ”ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ“ )= ‪ (۷٤‬ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ )‪ (۲‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )‪ ،(۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻛﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ‪) FA-DC67A‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻛﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻌﻛﻭﺳًﺎ )ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ )‪ (۲‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )‪ ،(۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ LH-DC60‬ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ )ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥۱‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ )ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ‪ ٦۷‬ﻣﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ]ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻥ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻏﻣﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻣﺳﻙ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫● ‪Image Transfer Utility‬‬
‫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪ ،(۱۳۲‬ﺍﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫● ‪Map Utility‬‬
‫ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻣُﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ )ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ (Mini-B :‬ﻻﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(۱۱۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ .(۱‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻛﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Windows‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪Downloads Images From Canon‬‬
‫‪/Camera‬ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ ،[Canon‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻭﻕ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥۳‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ‪،CameraWindow‬‬
‫[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺟً ﺎ )ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Windows 7‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Dock‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ؛ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ SELPHY CP‬ﻣﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻫﻧﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ )ﻁﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ (Mini-B :‬ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩءًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٥‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ُ ) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱٤۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۱٥٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٥٤‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻧﺳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ٍ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۱٥٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )= ‪.(۱٥٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٥٥‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[ ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺷﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۷‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ“ )= ‪ (۱٥٤‬ﻹﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٥٥‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﺧﻁﻳ ًﻁﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﻭﺭﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(۱٥٦‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫‪۱٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻁ ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ‪ L‬ﻭﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.4:3‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۱۳۰ x ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٥٥‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۱٥۷‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ )= ‪ (۱٥۹‬ﻭﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟ ُﻧﺳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪.Digital Print Order Format (DPOF‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٥٤‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﻟﻺﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ٥ – ۲‬ﻣﻥ ﻗﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪ ،(۸٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻭ]ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻣﻧﻌﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻬﺭﺱ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ٍ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫) ُﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۲۰‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫)ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹‬ﻧﺳﺧﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪.۳‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ“ )= ‪،(۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ[‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ“ )= ‪ (۹٥‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ“ )= ‪،(۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ“ )= ‪،(۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺷﺭﺍء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪– ۱٥۷‬‬
‫= ‪ ،(۱٥۸‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻵﻥ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٥۹‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٦۰‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٥۹‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٥۹‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻌﺗﻘﺩ ﺑﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﻔﺣﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺅ ﱢﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ )= ‪.(۱۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ )= ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﺑﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺑﻙ ﻣﺛﻼً ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻣﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺭﺍء ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )= ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺗﻔﺧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺎﻭﻑ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ )= ‪.(۱٤۸‬‬
‫‪۱٦۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٦۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ )= ‪.(٦۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪ ،(۸٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۲٦‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۳٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ‪.LED‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۳٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪(۳٥‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ[ )= ‪.(٥۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۷۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(۷۰ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(٥۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۲٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪.(۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(٥٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ‪.macro‬‬
‫ﺟﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﻭ ‪.(۷۷ =) AF‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭّ ﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۷۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٦۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪.(۱۰۳ = ،۷۰‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ )= ‪.(٦۹‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۱۷۸‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۸۳ = ،۷۹‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(۷۰ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۱۷۸‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۸۳ = ،۷۹‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻻﻧﻌﻛﺎﺱ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(۷۰ =) ISO‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(٥۹‬‬
‫ﱡ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺡ‪ [.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪ .(٥٤‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪(٤‬‬
‫)ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ؛ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻳﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﺟﺭﺏ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪.(۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻐﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“‪ ،‬ﻭ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ “FUNC.‬ﻭ”ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲ = – ۱٦۹‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻣﺯﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪ .(٤٥‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪ ،(٤٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۰‬‬
‫‪۱٦۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ‪ Story Highlights‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻳﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۸۰ = ،۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﺗﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻟﻠﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۱٤۲‬‬‫=‬
‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ) ‪.(٥۱‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ )= ‪.(۱۸۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٦۰‬ﻭ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٦۷‬ﻭ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٥۷‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺧﻠﻼً ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱٤۲‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﻡ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )= ‪ (۱۳۸‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺕ[ )= ‪ ،(۱۳۸‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺿﻌﻳ ًﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪ (٦۰‬ﺃﻭ ] [ )= ‪ (٦۷‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٥۷‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۳‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ‪.Story Highlights‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ )‪ ،(۸٦‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻸﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ‪.(۱۰٦ =) Story Highlights‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۲٥‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬‫ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪،[B‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺑﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٦٤‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪/‬ﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ‪ ۲۰‬ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺿﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ )= ‪.(۱۲۳‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪.(۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.(۱۱۹ = ،۱۱۸ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺗﺩﻋﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪ .(۱۷۸‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ً‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳُﻧﺻﺢ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪ .(۱۳۲‬ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪/.‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺟﺭّ ﺏ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻼً ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺇﺧﻁﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺻﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﺭّ ﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻅﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺇﺧﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﻁﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.(۱۳۷ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺟﺏ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫)=‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ )= ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ!‬
‫● ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪(۱٤۲‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ )= ‪ (۲‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۹‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ (۸۱ = ،٦۸ = ،٥٦ = ،۳۲‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫)= ‪ .(۱۰۱‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۹٦‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱۸‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻣﻲ! )= ‪(۹٤‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ‪ JPEG/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‪/‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪/.‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪/MOV‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪MP4‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ!‪/‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺋﻪ‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﻣﺔ )*( ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ* )= ‪ (۹۲‬ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ* )= ‪ (۹۳‬ﻭﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ* )= ‪ (۹۸‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪ (۱۰۰‬ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ*‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۰۱‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ* )= ‪ (۱٥۷‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ* )= ‪(۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ ،(۱٥۸ = ،۹۸ = ،۹٥‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻛﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱٥۷‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ .(۱٥۹‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱٥۷‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ (۱٥۹‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻘﺩ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۹٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ )= ‪ (۹٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪ (۱۰۰‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱٥۷‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ!‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ (9999‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ]ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )= ‪ (۱٤۲‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻠﻭءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ(‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ )‪ (Exx‬ﻭﺍﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱٥٤‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ )= ‪ .(۱٥٦‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺻﺣﻳﺣً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء ﻟﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﺗﻛﻔﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻹﺧﻼء ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﻙ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪.(۱۱۹‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺯ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ!‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ WPS‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﻁﺋﺔ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪.(۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻣﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ‬
‫● ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‪/‬ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪۱٦٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ُﺗﺣﺟﺏ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪،Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺗﻪ ﻷﻱ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻭﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ (9999‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﻠﻡ ﻣﺯﻳﺩًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻭﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻹﺧﻼء ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪ (۱۳۲‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫)‪ (۱۸‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪ ،(۳۸‬ﻣﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪(۷٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱۹‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ )= ‪(۱۸۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫)‪ (۲۰‬ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪ ،(۷۳‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(۷۷ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫)‪ (۲۱‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪(۷٥ =) AF‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ ،(۱٦۹‬ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‬
‫)= ‪(۳٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ )= ‪(۷۸‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪(۳٥‬‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ /‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)= ‪(۸۳ = ،۷۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﺭﻣﺯ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪(۳۷ =) IS‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۱٦۷‬‬
‫)˻˼(‬
‫)́˺(‬
‫)˽˼( )˼˼(‬
‫)˹˻(‬
‫)˺˻(‬
‫)˾˼(‬
‫)˹˽( )̂˼( )́˼()̀˼()˿˼( )˻˻(‬
‫)˺˽(‬
‫)˹˼(‬
‫)̂˻(‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪(۱٤۰‬‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫‪(٤٤ =) Drive mode‬‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ )= ‪(٥۰‬‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ )= ‪(٥۱‬‬
‫)̀˻(‬
‫)˿˻( )˾˻( )˽˻( )˼˻(‬
‫)‪ (۲۲‬ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(۷۰‬‬
‫)‪(۳٤‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۳‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،(٦۹ =) AE‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(۸۰ =) FE‬‬
‫)‪ (۳٥‬ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪(۷۳ =) MF‬‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )= ‪(۷۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱٦۷‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )= ‪ ،(۸۰‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )= ‪(٥۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٦‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )= ‪*(۱۸۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۷‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪(٥۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۳٦‬ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء )= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫)‪ (۳۷‬ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱۳۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۳۸‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(٥۳‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۷‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫)‪(۳۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۸‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(۸۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(٥۲‬‬
‫)‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﺁﻟﻲ ﺑﻁﻲء )= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫)‪ (٤۱‬ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫)́˻(‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(۷۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۳۲‬ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )= ‪(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٦‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪(۸۲‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˻( )˺˼(‬
‫)˼(‬
‫)˽(‬
‫)˾(‬
‫)˿(‬
‫)̀(‬
‫)́(‬
‫)̂(‬
‫)˹˺(‬
‫)˺˺(‬
‫)‪ (۳۱‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ )= ‪(۳٤‬‬
‫)‪(۳۳‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٥‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪(٦۹ =) AE‬‬
‫)̂˺( )̀˺( )˿˺( )˽˺( )˻˺(‬
‫)‪ (۳۰‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(۷۰ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(٤۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٤‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )= ‪(۸۲ = ،۸۱‬‬
‫)˾˺( )˼˺(‬
‫)‪ (۲۹‬ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫)ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫]ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ[‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ — ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ — ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ )= ‪.(۱٤۸‬‬
‫)˺˺( )˹˺( )̂( )́( )̀( )˿( )˾( )˽(‬
‫)˼( )˻(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˿˺(‬
‫)˾˺(‬
‫)˼˺(‬
‫)˽˺(‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۸٤‬‬
‫)˻˺(‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(۱۳۲‬‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪ ،(۱۰۱‬ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)= ‪(۱۰٥‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۲‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪(۷۳‬‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪(۱۰۰‬‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪(۹٤‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۳‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪ ،(۱۰۳‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ )= ‪(٦۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ – ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ )= ‪(۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫)̂˻(‬
‫)́˻(‬
‫)̀˻( )˾˻(‬
‫)˿˻(‬
‫ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ )ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ* ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )= ‪) (۱۰٦‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪(.‬‬
‫)˼˻(‬
‫)˽˻(‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪(۸٤ = ،۳۲‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۷‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ )= ‪(۸٦‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۸‬ﻓﻼﺵ )= ‪ ،(۷۸‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫)= ‪(۷۹‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱٦۷‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۹‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(۷۱‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪(۱۳۰ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪(۲۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪(۱٦۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ( )= ‪،۸۱‬‬
‫= ‪(۸۲‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪(۸۲‬‬
‫‪۱٦۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫)˹˻( )̂˺( )́˺( )̀˺(‬
‫)˻˻( )˺˻(‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫)‪ (۲۰‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ )= ‪(٥۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۱‬ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )= ‪ ،(۱۰۲ = ،۷۱‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ )= ‪(٥۷‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٤‬ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(۱۰۳ = ،۷۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٥‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ /‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫)= ‪(٥۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٦‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ )= ‪(۹۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۷‬ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( )= ‪ / (۸۰‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٥۰‬ﻭﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪ ،(۳٤‬ﻭ‪MP4‬‬
‫)ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ )= ‪(۱۰٦‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪،(٦۹‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۸‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )= ‪ (۱۸۰‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪(۱۸۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٦‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(۷۰ =) ISO‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۹‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )ﻟﻠﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ* ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )= ‪) (۱۰٦‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪(.(۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ )= ‪(۱۰٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪.(۱٥٤ =) PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪٤‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(۷۰ =) ISO‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪1600/ 3200 / 800 / 400 / 200 / 100 / 80‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻳﺽ )= ‪(۸۳ = ،۷۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(۷۹‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(۸۳‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(۸۲ = ،۸۱ =) Av/Tv‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ )= ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ / AE‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۳ (۸۰ = ،٦۹ =) FE‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) AE‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ( ‪ /‬ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪(۷۳‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪(۷٥ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪(۲۷‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫‪۱٦۹‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫– ‪– O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫– ‪O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫– –‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫– – –‬
‫– – –‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪– O O‬‬
‫‪O – O‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫– *‪* ۲‬‬
‫– ‪O O‬‬
‫– – –‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫– –‬
‫‪O O‬‬
‫– ‪O‬‬
‫‪O O‬‬
‫– ‪O‬‬
‫‪O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ FE‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫– ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۱۷۰‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫– – – ‪O O O – – – – – – – – – – O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫– – – ‪O O O – – – – – – – – O – O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O – – – O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪– O O O‬‬
‫– ‪– O O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫– ‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫– ‪– – – O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )= ‪(۷۱‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫*‪* ۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(۷۱‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ‪٤‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪(٤٤ =) Drive Mode‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –‬
‫*‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫– – –‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ‪ :٥ – ۱‬ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻪ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AF‬ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫– ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )= ‪(٤۹‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )= ‪(٥۰‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O‬‬
‫– ‪O O O O – – – – – – – – – O O O O O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )= ‪(۸۰‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪(٥۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(٦۰‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O – O O O‬‬
‫‪O – O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O ۲* O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫– ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪(۷٥ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪۱ AiAF‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫= ‪۲ ۷٥‬‬
‫(*‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O – O O O O O – – O O O O O O – O‬‬
‫– ‪– – – – O O O – – – – O – – – – O O‬‬
‫– ‪O O O O O O O O O – O O – – – – O O‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫– ‪O O O – O O O O O – O O‬‬
‫– ‪O O O – O O O O O – – O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫– ‪O – O O – – – – – – – – – O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O‬‬
‫– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪– – – – O O O – – – – O – O O O O – O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫– ‪– – – – O O O – – – – O – – – – O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O - O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O – O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O‬‬
‫– – ‪– – – O O O O O O O O O O – – – O‬‬
‫– ‪– O‬‬
‫– ‪– O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪(۳۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ*‬
‫‪2.0x / 1.6x‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪(٥۲ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )= ‪(۷٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ )= ‪(۷۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻻ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ )= ‪(٥٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ -MF‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ )= ‪(۷۳‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪2x/4x‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻥ )= ‪(۷۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪(۷٤ =) MF‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻣﺭ ‪ /‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ‪ /‬ﺃﺻﻔﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(۷۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ )= ‪(٥۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(۷۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ )= ‪(۸۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫– – ‪– – – – O O O – – – – O – – – – O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫– – ‪O O O – O O O O O O O O O – – – O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫– ‪– O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – O O O‬‬
‫‪– O O O O O O O O O O O O O - O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱٦۹‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱٦۹‬‬
‫– ‪– O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – O O O O O‬‬
‫– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫– – – –‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫– – – – – – – ‪– – – – – – – – – – – O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O‬‬
‫– ‪– O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷۳‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء )= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺧﻔﻑ )= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪(٥٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ /‬ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 4 /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ 8 /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ /‬ﺍﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ )= ‪(٥۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(٥۳ =) IS‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺁﻟﻲ )= ‪(٥۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫– ‪O – O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O – – – – – – O – – – – – – – – O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ‪O – O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫– ‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫– ‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫– ‪O – O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪ O‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷٤‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ )= ‪(۳۹‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ‪/‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )= ‪(٤۲ = ،٤۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪ /‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ /‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪ /‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪ /‬ﺑﻼ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﺁﻟﻲ ﺑﻁﻲء )= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫– ‪O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O – O – O O O O O – – O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪– O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫– ‪– – – – O O O – – – – O – – – – O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫– ‪– – O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫– ‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫‪O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪ (٤٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺽ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫– ‪O – O – O O O O O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪ O‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫– ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ“‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﺕ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫= ‪۸٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻁ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‬
‫= ‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫= ‪۲۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪/‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫= ‪۸۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫= ‪۹۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۰‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫= ‪۹٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۰‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۹٤‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۰ =،۲٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫= ‪۹۸‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‬
‫= ‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫= ‪۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۲ =،۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫= ‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‬
‫= ‪۱۱۱‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫= ‪۸۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۱۷٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫= ‪۸٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫= ‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫= ‪۸۸‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫= ‪۱٤٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫= ‪۸٤‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪۹۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫= ‪۹۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ‬
‫= ‪۸٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ‬
‫= ‪۸۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷۷‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫= ‪۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫= ‪۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫= ‪۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫= ‪۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱٥۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫= ‪۹۸‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۹٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱٥٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪۹۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫= ‪۸٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ‬
‫= ‪۸۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫= ‪۹۳‬‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫= ‪۸۸‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫= ‪۹۲‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻟﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻁﻼً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺎﻕ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﻝ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻅﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻧﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻧﻅﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻛﺛﻑ )ﻗﻁﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﺇﺛﺭ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﺛﺭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﻛﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻕ ﻭﺍﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﻳﻑ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﺑﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺣﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‪ ... (.‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۲۰٫۳‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ‪ .............................‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۲۱٫۱‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .............................................‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪۱/۲٫۳‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫)ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ( ‪ ۲۱٥٫۰ – ٤٫۳ ........................................‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫)‪ ۱۲۰۰ – ۲٤‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ‪ ٥۰ ...................................‬ﺿﻌ ًﻔﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ .....................................................‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ(‪ ..................‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۲۰۰‬ﺿﻌ ًﻔﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫)ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ( ‪ ...............‬ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤۸۰۰‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪ ......................................................‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ TFT‬ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ۷٫٥ ..............................................‬ﺳﻡ )‪ ۳٫۰‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ....................................‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤٦۱٫۰۰۰‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ...................................... (.‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ‪:Auto/P‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٥٫۹‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ :P‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤٫٤‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪ LV‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ :P‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ( ‪ ٥۰ ..........‬ﺳﻡ – ‪ ٥٫٥‬ﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ( ‪ ۱٫۳ ..........‬ﺳﻡ – ‪ ۳٫۰‬ﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪) Auto Mode‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ( ‪ ۱/۲۰۰۰ – ۱ .......‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ‪ ۱٥ ....................................‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ‪ ۱/۲۰۰۰ ......................................‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ‪ .............................‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﺎﻥ ‪ Tv‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪،۲ ،۲٫٥ ،۳٫۲ ،٤ ،٥ ،٦ ،۸ ،۱۰ ،۱۳ ،۱٥‬‬
‫‪،۰٫۳ ،۰٫٤ ،۰٫٥ ،۰٫٦ ،۰٫۸ ،۱ ،۱٫۳ ،۱٫٦‬‬
‫‪،۱/۱٥ ،۱/۱۳ ،۱/۱۰ ،۱/۸ ،۱/٦ ،۱/٥ ،۱/٤‬‬
‫‪،۱/٦۰ ،۱/٥۰ ،۱/٤۰ ،۱/۳۰ ،۱/۲٥ ،۱/۲۰‬‬
‫‪،۱/۲۰۰ ،۱/۱٦۰ ،۱/۱۲٥ ،۱/۱۰۰ ،۱/۸۰‬‬
‫‪،۱/٦٤۰ ،۱/٥۰۰ ،۱/٤۰۰ ،۱/۳۲۰ ،۱/۲٥۰‬‬
‫‪،۱/۱٦۰۰ ،۱/۱۲٥۰ ،۱/۱۰۰۰ ،۱/۸۰۰‬‬
‫‪۱/۲۰۰۰‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪) ۸٫۰ – ۳٫٤ .........................................‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ(‬
‫‪) ۸٫۰ – ٦٫٥‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪ AiAF .............................................AF‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﻋﺩﺩ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ :AF‬ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ‪،(۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪ ،AF‬ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ...........................................‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪Design rule for Camera‬‬
‫)‪File system (DCF‬؛ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫)ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪(1.1‬‬
‫‪۱۷۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪Exif 2.3 (DCF 2.0) ...................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪JPEG ............................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪MP4 .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ‪) MPEG-4 AAC-LC .................................................‬ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-6LH .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪Hi-Speed USB (Mini-B) ....................................................‬‬
‫‪) HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪(C‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﺝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ )ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ(‬
‫ﺧﺭﺝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺗﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ )‪(NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ‪Wi-Fi ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪IEEE 802.11b/g/n :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ‪ ۲٫٤ :‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﻭﺍﺕ‪۱۱ – ۱ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪،WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP) ،WEP :‬‬
‫‪WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP) NFC‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪ ٤۰ – ۰ ..........................................‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪(CIPA‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪ x‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻕ(‪ ۹۱٫۹ x ۸۱٫۷ x ۱۲۰٫۰ ............................‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ )ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ‪(CIPA‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ ...........................................‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤٤۲‬ﺟﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ ‪ ......................................‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤۱۸‬ﺟﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ‪(CIPA‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۲۰٥‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۲۹۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪ ۱٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪*(CIPA‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ*‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ ﻧﻣﻁ ]‬‫[ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ ﻧﻣﻁ ]‬‫[ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫*‬
‫ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫* ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻻﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‬
‫(‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺑﺔ )‬
‫‪ ۰‬ﺳﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ۱٫۳‬ﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ۱٫۳‬ﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ٥۰ – ۰‬ﺳﻡ‬
‫–‬
‫(‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪ ٤:۳ (٤۹‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ )ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸۰‬‬
‫‪۱۷٦٦‬‬
‫‪۲۹۸۰‬‬
‫‪۳٥٤٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ )ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‬
‫)‪(۱۰۸۰ x ۱۹۲۰‬‬
‫‪ ٥۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۲۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥۹‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(۱۰۸۰ x ۱۹۲۰‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪ ۲٦‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪٥‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﻭ‪ ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۲۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥۹‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۲۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥۹‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(٤۸۰ x ٦٤۰‬‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ۲۲‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۳٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫)‪(۷۲۰ x ۱۲۸۰‬‬
‫‪٥۹۲٥‬‬
‫● ﺗﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۷٥٥‬‬
‫● ﺗﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺻﻧﻔﺔ ﻛﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD speed class‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪.۱۰‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۳٤٤‬‬
‫‪٥۳۹۹۲‬‬
‫‪۸۰۹۸۸‬‬
‫● ﺗﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-6LH‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫‪ ۳٫۷‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ ۱۰٦۰‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳۰۰‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤۰ – ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ۰٫۰۸٥‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ )‪ ۱۰۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ( ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۰٫۰٥‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ )‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ(‬
‫‪ ٤٫۲‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ۰٫۷ ،‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪(NB-6LH‬‬
‫‪ ٤۰ – ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪) LH-DC60‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً(‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺭ × ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻗﻁﺭ ‪ ۲۷٫۷ x ٦۹٫٦‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺟﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪Camera & Imaging‬‬
‫)‪.Products Association (CIPA‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸۲‬‬
‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪۷٥ (AF‬‬
‫‪) Av‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۸۲‬‬
‫‪) Camera Connect‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ( ‪۱۱۲‬‬
‫‪) CameraWindow‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ( ‪۱٥۱ ،۱۱۸‬‬
‫‪۱۲۳ ،۱۱۱ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫‪۱٥۷ DPOF‬‬
‫‪) M‬ﺗﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۸۲‬‬
‫‪) Macro‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ( ‪۷۳‬‬
‫‪) P‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۸‬‬
‫‪۱٥٤ ،۱٤۷ PictBridge‬‬
‫‪۱۰٦ Story highlights‬‬
‫‪) Tv‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۸۱‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪) iFrame‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪٦۷‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۱۲۷ ،۱۱۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ‪۱۲٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪۱۲۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪۷٥ AF‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ ‪۱٤٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪۱٦۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪۱۰٤‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪ /‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ‪٥۱ ،٥۰‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪۱۸۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪۱۰۲ ،۷۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ← ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ‪۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪۱۱۸‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۱٥۲ ،۱۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ← ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۲٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪۲۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ‪۲۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ‪۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪۷٥ AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪۷٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪۷٤ MF‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪٥۲ AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۷۷ AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ )ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ( ‪۷۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱٦۷‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ← ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ‪۳۸ ،۳۳ ،۲۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ‪۳۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ‪۱٥٥ ،۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪۹٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪٥۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ‪۱۷ ،۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ‪۱٦۸ ،۱٦۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ← ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪۹٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ‪۹٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ← ۱٤٦‬ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ← ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ← ۱٥٤‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲۳‬‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۸۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۹۳‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪۱٤۸‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ‪۲۳‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ‪۸۸‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۹۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ ‪۹۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﻲء ‪۷۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۷۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۷۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ‪۱٦۹‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ ‪۱٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ‪۷۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪۳۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ‪۹٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪۱٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪٤۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻣﺯ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ‪٤۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪) Auto‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۳۲ ،۲۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ‪۱٥٤ ،۱٤۹ ،۱٤۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪۷٥ (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ ‪۱٤۰‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪۷٦‬‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ ‪۸۸‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٦۸ AE‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ ← SD/SDHC/SDXC‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪۱۸۰‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۱۰۳ ،۷۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺳﻡ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪۷٥ AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ‪۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ‪۹۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺱ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۹۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ ‪٥۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪۳۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۳٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ( ‪۷۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪۷۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ‪٥۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۲٦‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ← ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ‪۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ‪۱٦۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ ‪۱٤۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۲٦‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۱٥۲ ،۱۱۸‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪۷۰ ISO‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱٤٦ ،۲‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪۱٤۸‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ‪۷۲‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ ‪۷۲‬‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪٦۹‬‬
‫ﻁﻭﻟﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۹‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۹۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱۳٤ ،۸٦ GPS‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ ‪۹۲‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ‪٥۱‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ‪٦۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪٦۹ AE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۸۰ FE‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ‪۱۷۷ ،۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪۲۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪٦۹ AE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۷۷ AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۸۰ FE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ‪۷٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻕ ← ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ‪۱٦٥‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۸‬‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۰‬‬
‫‪۱۸۳‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ ‪٥۷‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪۱٤۸ ،۱٤۷ HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪۱٤۹ (AV‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪ (AV‬ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ‪،۱٤۷‬‬
‫‪۱٤۹ ،۱٤۸‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ‪۷٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫‪۷۳ Macro‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪۷۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۳۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪۳۹‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۹‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۸۰‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ( ‪٦۷‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪٥۳‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻣﺯ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪٤۹‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۱۷‬‬
‫ﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪۱۱۱ Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸٤‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪WLAN‬‬
‫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ WLAN‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻘﺎﺏ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎﻙ ﻟﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪،WLAN‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ WLAN‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻌﺭﺿﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﻘﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻪ‬‫ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫● ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﻳﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻛﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﺍﺗﻳﺟﻳﺔ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺳﺎﺋﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺭﻕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻼً ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﺑﺙ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺣﺗﻭﺍء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺃﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻠﺩ ﻣﻔﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ‪ -‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺍﻹﺳﺗﺎﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻁﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻛﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻫﻭﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﻔﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺻﺎﺭﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺧﺫﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.LAN‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻟﻺﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ )ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺄﻱ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻗﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺳﺭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ(‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳُﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻭﺻﻭﻻً ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺻﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸٥‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺻﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺳﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻣﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﺣﻳﺔ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺗﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ )ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻧﺗﺣﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﺃﻭ ﻫﺟﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻁﻼﻕ )ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺣﺻﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺗﻙ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻬﻡ ﺟﻳﺩ ﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺎﻁﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ .Apple Inc.‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ‪ App Store‬ﻭ‪ iPhone‬ﻭ‪ iPad‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪Apple Inc.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺩ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC.‬‬
‫● ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ iFrame‬ﻭﺭﻣﺯ ‪ iFrame‬ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪Apple Inc.‬‬
‫● ®‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ®‪ Wi-Fi Alliance‬ﻭ™‪ WPA‬ﻭ™‪ WPA2‬ﻭ™‪ Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺻﺎﻟﺢ ‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ N‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ NFC Forum, Inc.‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺿﻔﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ‪ -‬ﻳُﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ‪ - DPS over IP‬ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪ PictBridge‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻟﻛﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ exFAT‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺧﺻﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard‬‬
‫‪and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or‬‬
‫‪decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for‬‬
‫‪a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider‬‬
‫‪licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant‬‬
‫‪video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4‬‬
‫‪standard.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۷‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺧﺳﺎﺋﺭ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising